diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ADSiteLink.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ADSiteLink.md index cc1b89a208..b2dc772e31 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ADSiteLink.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ADSiteLink.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example returns a list of all IP site links in your organization that have ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name or GUID of the IP site link for which you want to view configuration information. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AgentLog.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AgentLog.md index 5c34512eea..97f37bc9e7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AgentLog.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AgentLog.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example returns a report that has statistics collected between 09:00 (9 A.M ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Location -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Location parameter specifies the directory that contains the log files that you can use to build usage reports. The default path is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\AgentLog. You need to enclose the file path in quotation marks ("). @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportService -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportService parameter specifies the transport service that you want to view or modify. Valid values for this parameter are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-App.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-App.md index 4dfc80bbfd..6fcb3f8850 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-App.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-App.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example displays the summary list of apps installed by administrators for t ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the GUID of the app that you want to view. To find the GUID value of an app, run the command Get-App | Format-Table -Auto DisplayName,AppId. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox where the apps are installed. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationApp -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationApp switch includes apps that are installed for the organization (not bound to a specific user) in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrivateCatalog switch includes private catalog add-ins in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AttachmentFilterEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AttachmentFilterEntry.md index eef7c64274..646a49659f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AttachmentFilterEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AttachmentFilterEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example returns only the attachment filter entries that filter attachments ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies which attachment filter entry the command retrieves. The Identity parameter accepts values in the format Type:Name, where Type is one of the following values: @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md index f58a7b6e34..66ab27f224 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the Attachment Filtering agent c ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuditLogSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuditLogSearch.md index 1074a5cee0..2045a18d7e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuditLogSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuditLogSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example returns a list of current administrator audit log searches. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the GUID for an audit log search. You can run the command Get-AuditLogSearch | Format-List Identity to display the GUIDs for all current audit log searches. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreatedAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CreatedAfter parameter filters the results to audit log searches that were created after the specified date. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreatedBefore -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CreatedBefore parameter filters the results to audit log searches that were created before the specified date. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Type parameter specifies the type of audit log searches to return. Use the value Admin to return administrator audit log searches or use mailbox to return mailbox audit log searches. If the Type parameter isn't used, the cmdlet returns both administrator and mailbox audit log searches. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthConfig.md index 9f1e7d1fa9..7bdab82ee5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example retrieves the authorization configuration for the Exchange organiza ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthRedirect.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthRedirect.md index 2fd82357b2..657835080e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthRedirect.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthRedirect.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example shows detailed information about the OAuth redirection object named ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the existing OAuth redirection object that you want to view. The object name uses the syntax `AuthRedirect-Bearer-GUID`. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthServer.md index 18a995e5e5..a92ebaca89 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves detailed information for the authorization server named W ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the authorization server object that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the authorization server. For example: @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthenticationPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthenticationPolicy.md index 0cc8f2ce52..67391dcc72 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthenticationPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AuthenticationPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example specifies whether legacy Exchange tokens for Ou ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the authentication policy you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md index 9427b28c13..d247dcbc5e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all Autodiscover virtual directories in t ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Autodiscover virtual directory that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADPropertiesOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ADPropertiesOnly switch specifies whether to return only the virtual directory properties that are stored in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories switch shows information about backend virtual directories on Mailbox servers. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md index dd98d48602..5b91b6e32b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example returns details information for the availability address space obje ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the availability address space that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the object. For example: @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AvailabilityConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AvailabilityConfig.md index 41769cda65..7a7ef25ed3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AvailabilityConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-AvailabilityConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this examples returns the tenant IDs that free/busy informat ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the availability configuration that you want to view. You don't need to use this parameter, because there's only one availability configuration object named Availability Configuration in any organization. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CASMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CASMailbox.md index 01bae9325f..a7e139117d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CASMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CASMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example filters the cmdlet output to only include share ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncDebugLogging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncDebugLogging switch shows the actual value of the ActiveSyncDebugLogging property for the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncSuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Monitoring -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProtocolSettings switch returns the server names, TCP ports and encryption methods for the following settings: @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadIsOptimizedForAccessibility -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadIsOptimizedForAccessibility switch specifies whether to read the value of the IsOptimizedForAccessibility property on the mailbox (whether the mailbox is configured to use the light version of Outlook on the web). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecalculateHasActiveSyncDevicePartnership -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecalculateHasActiveSyncDevicePartnership switch recalculates the value of the HasActiveSyncDevicePartnership property on the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CASMailboxPlan.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CASMailboxPlan.md index b18ba0fbd9..6f009eb993 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CASMailboxPlan.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CASMailboxPlan.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the specified CAS mailbox plan. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the CAS mailbox plan that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the CAS mailbox plan. For example: @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarDiagnosticAnalysis.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarDiagnosticAnalysis.md index 254a8bc41d..0d4e77967b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarDiagnosticAnalysis.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarDiagnosticAnalysis.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ For basic analysis of the items, don't include the DetailLevel parameter, or use ### -CalendarLogs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CalendarLogs parameter specifies the calendar item that you want to analyze. You identify the calendar item by storing the output of the Get-CalendarDiagnosticLog cmdlet to a variable and using that variable for the value of this parameter. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DetailLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DetailLevel parameter specifies the level of detail you want to see in the analysis output. Valid values are: @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalObjectId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GlobalObjectId parameter specifies the identity of the calendar item you want to analyze. In Exchange 2013, you can use this parameter with the LogLocation parameter to specify the calendar item if the location contains multiple exported .msg files. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutputAs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OutputAs parameter specifies the output format of the command. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarDiagnosticLog.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarDiagnosticLog.md index 381a1fe665..59170cb682 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarDiagnosticLog.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarDiagnosticLog.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ In **Exchange 2013**, this example exports all calendar items in the Calendar Di ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the calendar items. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MeetingID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MeetingID parameter filters the results by the globally unique identifier of the calendar item. The value is the CleanGlobalObjectId property of the calendar item that's available in the output of this cmdlet, or by using other MAPI examination tools. An example value is 040000008200E00074C5B7101A82E00800000000B0225ABF0710C80100000000000000001000000005B27C05AA7C4646B0835D5EB4E41C55. This value is constant throughout the lifetime of the calendar item. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Subject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Subject parameter identifies the calendar items by the specified text in the Subject field. The text values that you specify aren't case sensitive. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). You can control whether to use exact matching by using the ExactMatch parameter. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EntryId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EntryId parameter filters the results by entry ID. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExactMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExactMatch parameter specifies whether to use an exact match or a partial match for text values that you specify for the Subject parameter. Valid values are: @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemClass -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ItemClass parameter filters the results by the specified MessageClass property value of the calendar item (for example, IPM.Appointment). You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ItemIds parameter filters the results by item ID. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Latest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Latest switch specifies whether to return calendar log data for only the most recent calendar item. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter determines the number of results returned by the cmdlet. The maximum value is 1000. @@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarNotification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarNotification.md index 8805d48276..908c4eb1f9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarNotification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarNotification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example returns the calendar text message notification settings for Tony's ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarProcessing.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarProcessing.md index 7e0d1c3a47..72c4b9ede9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarProcessing.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CalendarProcessing.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example shows the calendar processing options for the resource mailbox Room ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the resource mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClassificationRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClassificationRuleCollection.md index d193a9e80d..f4eaa39c92 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClassificationRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClassificationRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the classification rule collecti ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the classification rule collection you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the classification rule collection. For example, you can specify the name, rule collection name or distinguished name (DN) of the classification rule collection. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessArray.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessArray.md index 8bc2e48ab3..1b1d7b33b3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessArray.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessArray.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the Client Access array named CASA ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Client Access array that you want to view. You can use these values: @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Site -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Site parameter filters the results by Active Directory site. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the site. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessRule.md index 256fd14a48..954e243ebd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example retrieves details about the client access rule named "Block Client ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the client access rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the client access rule. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessServer.md index 09650e1a71..3feb15fdc8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the server mail.contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server with the Client Access server role installed that you want to view. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeAlternateServiceAccountCredentialPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeAlternateServiceAccountCredentialPassword switch specifies whether to include the password of the alternate service account in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeAlternateServiceAccountCredentialStatus -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeAlternateServiceAccountCredentialStatus parameter specifies whether to include the status of the alternate service account in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessService.md index 0bc4dd10e3..9045c8e052 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ClientAccessService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the server mail.contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server with the Client Access server role installed that you want to view. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeAlternateServiceAccountCredentialPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeAlternateServiceAccountCredentialPassword switch specifies whether to include the password of the alternate service account in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeAlternateServiceAccountCredentialStatus -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeAlternateServiceAccountCredentialStatus parameter specifies whether to include the status of the alternate service account in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CmdletExtensionAgent.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CmdletExtensionAgent.md index 2de9f2d0a0..3a30158c94 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CmdletExtensionAgent.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-CmdletExtensionAgent.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example displays detailed information for the Exchange cmdlet extension age ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the cmdlet extension agent that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the agent. For example: @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Assembly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Assembly parameter filters the results by the specified Assembly property value. The value for the built-in Exchange cmdlet extension agents is Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAgent.dll. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter filters the results by enabled or disabled cmdlet extension agents. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSearch.md index 9ae15ddfbb..982edba701 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This examples show details of the compliance search named Case 1234. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search that you want to view. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSearchAction.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSearchAction.md index b21f4a1973..691fd08ab6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSearchAction.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSearchAction.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ This example shows details about the compliance search action named "Case 1234_P ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search action that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the compliance search action. For example: @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Details -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Details switch specifies whether to include detailed information in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Export -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The IncludeCredential switch specifies whether to include the credential in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Preview -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Preview switch filters the results by Preview compliance search actions. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Purge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this parameter is available only in the Search and Purge role. By default, this role is assigned only to the Organization Management and Data Investigator role groups. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md index 1bf2a33a12..c3f73ba2a2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the compliance security filter n ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Action parameter filters the results by the type of search action that a filter is applied to. Valid values are: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The FilterName parameter specifies the name of the compliance security filter that you want to view. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The User parameter filters the results by the user who gets a filter applied to their searches. Valid values are: @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Contact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Contact.md index 2869b21596..81424e6505 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Contact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Contact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ This example uses the Anr parameter to retrieve all mail-enabled contacts whose ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the contact that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the contact. For example: @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientTypeDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientTypeDetails parameter filters the results by the specified contact subtype. Valid values are: @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ContentFilterConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ContentFilterConfig.md index fc479a47c6..0f2fff212e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ContentFilterConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ContentFilterConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the content filter configuration ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ContentFilterPhrase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ContentFilterPhrase.md index 2e50b904e8..0f05d0c960 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ContentFilterPhrase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ContentFilterPhrase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ This example returns all custom words and phrases that contain the words free of ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies a custom word or phrase to display. You must enclose the value of the Identity parameter in quotation marks ("). @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Phrase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Phrase parameter specifies a custom word or phrase to display. You must enclose the value of the Phrase parameter in quotation marks ("). diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DataClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DataClassification.md index 00d4186107..5e0a7b3d85 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DataClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DataClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example returns details of the built-in data classification rule named SWIF ### -ClassificationRuleCollectionIdentity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ClassificationRuleCollectionIdentity parameter filters the results by the name of the data classification rule collection. The data classification rule collection that contains the built-in data classification rules is named Microsoft Rule Package. The data classification that contains new data classification rules that you create that use document fingerprints is named Fingerprint Classification Collection. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the data classification rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the data classification rule. For example: @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index 4b2ad570fd..41cc3f44e7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example displays the properties of the DAG DAG2. Because it includes the St ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG to query. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Status parameter instructs the command to query Active Directory for additional information and to include real-time status information in the output. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md index 06b82d75b5..e98e8e73a5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ This example gets complete configuration and status information for the network ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of a DAG or a DAG network. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Mailbox server in the DAG to retrieve health information for the DAG network from. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DeliveryAgentConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DeliveryAgentConnector.md index 985c0a3e68..ebf13c319c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DeliveryAgentConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DeliveryAgentConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves a list of all delivery agent connectors in your organizat ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or name of the delivery agent connector. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DetailsTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DetailsTemplate.md index db826becce..769cf1f0e9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DetailsTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DetailsTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example retrieves all attributes for all User details template types in all ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID of the details template or specifies the details template type and language separated by a backslash, for example, en-us\\User. Details template types are: @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DistributionGroup.md index db98febfb6..49bda2ddb0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ This example returns all distribution groups and mail-enabled security groups wh ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the distribution group or mail-enabled security group that you want to view. You can use any values that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter filters the results by the owner of the group. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the owner. For example: @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientTypeDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientTypeDetails parameter filters the results by the specified distribution group subtype. Valid values are: @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DistributionGroupMember.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DistributionGroupMember.md index fced01ba5f..13fe1b9472 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DistributionGroupMember.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DistributionGroupMember.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ In the cloud-based service, this example downloads a comma-separated value (CSV) ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the distribution group or mail-enabled security group. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DlpPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DlpPolicy.md index e211930a67..879c90089d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DlpPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DlpPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the DLP policy named Employee Nu ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the DLP policy that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DlpPolicyTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DlpPolicyTemplate.md index 7152f5927d..83bbc7993e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DlpPolicyTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DlpPolicyTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the DLP policy template named GL ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the DLP policy template you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the DLP policy template. For example, you can specify the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the DLP policy template. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DomainController.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DomainController.md index 17becbdbe3..4d274a36d3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DomainController.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DomainController.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ For more information about pipelining and the Format-Table cmdlet, see [About Pi ### -GlobalCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GlobalCatalog switch specifies whether the command should return a list of global catalog servers. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the domain for which you want to return a list of domain controllers. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Forest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Forest parameter specifies the FQDN of the root domain of the forest for which you want to return a list of domain controllers. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DynamicDistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DynamicDistributionGroup.md index 5b6aa5a8d5..04bd1bfbd6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DynamicDistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-DynamicDistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ This example returns the members for the dynamic distribution group named Full T ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the dynamic distribution group that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the dynamic distribution group. For example: @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeSystemObjects -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter filters the results by the owner of the group. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the owner. For example: @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EcpVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EcpVirtualDirectory.md index f16142ba9d..088a852375 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EcpVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EcpVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all Exchange Control Panel virtual direct ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ECP virtual directory that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADPropertiesOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ADPropertiesOnly switch specifies whether to return only the virtual directory properties that are stored in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories switch shows information about backend virtual directories on Mailbox servers. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EdgeSubscription.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EdgeSubscription.md index 848fef4f46..33533e1544 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EdgeSubscription.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EdgeSubscription.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves the Edge Subscription information for the Edge Transport ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the Edge Transport server for which you want to retrieve Edge Subscription information. The identity is expressed as the host name of the Edge Transport server. If no identity is specified, all Edge Subscriptions are returned. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md index cf67707480..a9aa2ccf24 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example reads the configuration of the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service configuration you want to view. @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Site -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Site parameter specifies the Active Directory site that EdgeSync connects to for synchronizing configuration and recipient data. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EligibleDistributionGroupForMigration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EligibleDistributionGroupForMigration.md index 18f1ca9705..37f3f6bc74 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EligibleDistributionGroupForMigration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EligibleDistributionGroupForMigration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all distribution groups that can be upgra ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter filters the results by the email address of the specified distribution group. If no results are returned for the specified email address, the group can't be upgraded to a Microsoft 365 Group. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter filters the results by the manager of the distribution group (the ManagedBy property). You can use any value that uniquely identifies the distribution group manager. For example: @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EmailAddressPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EmailAddressPolicy.md index 6b73acce8c..e9219c252c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EmailAddressPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EmailAddressPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the email address policy named Con ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the email address policy that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeMailboxSettingOnlyPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EventLogLevel.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EventLogLevel.md index 28431d01ac..02209e4607 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EventLogLevel.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-EventLogLevel.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example displays the event categories and log levels for the server Exchang ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter filters the results by the name of the event category. To see the available event categories, run the following command: Get-EventLogLevel. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md index 41ba1e52ca..a8a7a89513 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example shows the configuration information for all organizations and forma ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the organization. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeCertificate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeCertificate.md index 1a7503a3a4..1e8ea547d3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeCertificate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeCertificate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ This example shows which certificate Exchange selects for the domain name mail.c ### -Thumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Thumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint value of the certificate that you want to view. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the certificate that you want to view. Valid values are: @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter filters the results by the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) or server name values in the Subject Name or the Subject Alternative Name fields. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Instance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeDiagnosticInfo.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeDiagnosticInfo.md index 8bf3fbf192..70cd83db86 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeDiagnosticInfo.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeDiagnosticInfo.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.Management-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example display the XML output of the command in format that's easier to re ### -Argument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Argument parameter specifies a valid argument to use with the specified Component value. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Component -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Component parameter returns detailed information for the specified Component of the given Process value. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Process -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Process parameter provides details for the specified Exchange process. Valid values are the name of the process (for example, MSExchangeTransport or Microsoft.Exchange.Directory.TopologyService). @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Unlimited -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Unlimited switch tells the command to return all available information. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeFeature.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeFeature.md index b9e03ef705..81225184cb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeFeature.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeFeature.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: lusassl-msft external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example returns information about the feature with the feature id PING.1.0. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FeatureID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FeatureID parameter specifies the feature you want to query information about. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RingLevel parameter specifies the ring level you want to query information about. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Status parameter specifies the status you want to query information about. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServer.md index c98652453b..f9f4549937 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the Exchange server named Mailbo ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Exchange server. For example: @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Domain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Domain parameter filters the results by the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the domain (for example, contoso.com). @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Status switch specifies whether to include additional property values in the results, for example, the Watson state, StaticDomainControllers, and runtime domain controller usage. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServerAccessLicense.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServerAccessLicense.md index f9685a6836..10296db440 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServerAccessLicense.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServerAccessLicense.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServerAccessLicenseUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServerAccessLicenseUser.md index 983741a576..13f0438929 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServerAccessLicenseUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeServerAccessLicenseUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example returns the unique users for the license named Exchange Server 2016 ### -LicenseName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LicenseName parameter specifies the license type that you want to view. You can find the available license type values by running the Get-ExchangeServerAccessLicense cmdlet. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeSettings.md index b3c862a120..b61081fd3d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ExchangeSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all Exchange setting objects. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the Exchange setting object. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the object. For example: @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigName parameter filter the results by the specified property name. The value you specify is visible in the EffectiveSetting property. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter filters the results by mailbox database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Diagnostic switch specifies whether to return extremely detailed information in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiagnosticArgument parameter modifies the results that are returned by using the Diagnostic switch. Typically, you use the Diagnostic switch and the DiagnosticArgument parameter only at the request of Microsoft Customer Service and Support to troubleshoot problems. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenericScopeName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GenericScopeName parameter filters the results by the scope. The available values are determined by the schema of the Exchange setting object. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenericScopes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GenericScopes parameter filters the results by the scope. The available values are determined by the schema of the Exchange setting object. This parameter uses the syntax `"key1=value1","key2=value2", "keyN=valueN`. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenericScopeValue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GenericScopeValue parameter filters the results by the value of the scope specified by the GenericScopeName parameter. The available values are determined by the schema of the Exchange setting object. @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Organization -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Process -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Process parameter filters the results by the specified process. The available values are determined by the schema of the Exchange setting object. @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter filters the results by Exchange server. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The User parameter filters the results by user. You identify the user by their GUID value (for example, 87246450-1b19-4c81-93dc-1a4200eff66c). To find the GUID for a user, run the following command: `Get-User | Format-List Name,GUID`. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FailedContentIndexDocuments.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FailedContentIndexDocuments.md index 5bfda847f8..066bbf3c00 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FailedContentIndexDocuments.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FailedContentIndexDocuments.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ This example retrieves a list of items that couldn't be indexed by Exchange Sear ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDatabase parameter specifies the database from which to get the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies a Mailbox server. You can use the following values: @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Archive switch restricts the scope of the cmdlet to the user's archive. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ErrorCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ErrorCode parameter allows you to retrieve documents that failed indexing with a specific error code. You can use the cmdlet without this parameter to list all failed documents for a mailbox, a mailbox database or a Mailbox server. The output includes the error codes and reason for failure. If required, you can then restrict the output to a specific error code from the results. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FailureMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FailureMode parameter specifies the type of error. Use the following values. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederatedDomainProof.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederatedDomainProof.md index 4885ae058c..42a8bff194 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederatedDomainProof.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederatedDomainProof.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example uses a specific certificate for the domain contoso.com. ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies the domain name for which the cryptographically secure string is generated. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Thumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Thumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint of an existing certificate. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md index aedaada0b0..0e704f6ca6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example retrieves the Exchange organization's federated organization identi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the organization ID. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeExtendedDomainInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IncludeExtendedDomainInfo switch specifies that the command query Microsoft Federation Gateway for the status of each accepted domain that's federated. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederationInformation.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederationInformation.md index cbc458cea9..d899966f96 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederationInformation.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederationInformation.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example gets federation information from the domain contoso.com. ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DomainName parameter specifies the domain name for which federation information is to be retrieved. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassAdditionalDomainValidation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassAdditionalDomainValidation switch specifies that the command skip validation of domains from the external Exchange organization. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustedHostnames -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TrustedHostnames parameter specifies the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of federation endpoints. Federation endpoints are the client access (frontend) services on Mailbox servers in an organization with federation enabled. Explicitly specifying the TrustedHostnames parameter allows the cmdlet to bypass prompting if the certificate presented by the endpoint doesn't match the domain name specified in the DomainName parameter. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederationTrust.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederationTrust.md index a6583ce2f7..7d1bbbde17 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederationTrust.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FederationTrust.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This example retrieves properties of the federation trust configured for the Exc ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies a federation trust ID. If not specified, the cmdlet returns all federation trusts configured for the Exchange organization. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ForeignConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ForeignConnector.md index e2055e5041..807457d46f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ForeignConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ForeignConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example displays detailed configuration information for the Foreign connect ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Foreign connector that you want to examine. The Identity parameter can take any of the following values for the Foreign connector object: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FrontendTransportService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FrontendTransportService.md index ff407fa6e7..61cce09aa7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FrontendTransportService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-FrontendTransportService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves the detailed configuration information for the Front End ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server with the Client Access server role installed that you want to view. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-GlobalAddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-GlobalAddressList.md index 9f93791074..bc4c1f9df5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-GlobalAddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-GlobalAddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the GAL named GAL\_AgencyB. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the global address list that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the GAL. For example: @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultOnly switch filters the results so only the default GAL is returned. You don't need to use a value with this switch. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md index 75a07338cb..a92c1f42de 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the global monitoring overrides th ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Group.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Group.md index 175c1c7ad4..2d55c82323 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Group.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Group.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example uses the Anr parameter to return all groups that begin with "Mar". ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the group object that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientTypeDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientTypeDetails parameter filters the results by the specified group subtype. Valid values are: @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HealthReport.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HealthReport.md index 8629351a23..ac6f437d9e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HealthReport.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HealthReport.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example retrieves health information for the server named Mailbox01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GroupSize parameter determines the size of the group to process against for a rollup. The default value is 12. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HaImpactingOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HaImpactingOnly switch filters the results to only the monitors that have HaImpacting set to True. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HealthSet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HealthSet parameter filters the results by the specified health set. Monitors that are similar or are tied to a component's architecture are grouped to form a health set. You can determine the collection of monitors (and associated probes and responders) in a given health set by using the Get-MonitoringItemIdentity cmdlet. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinimumOnlinePercent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MinimumOnlinePercent parameter specifies the number of members in the group to be functioning with rollup information Degraded instead of Unhealthy. The default value is 70 percent. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RollupGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RollupGroup switch specifies that the health data is rolled up across servers with redundancy limits. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HostedContentFilterRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HostedContentFilterRule.md index 61414d2265..e2df6989bd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HostedContentFilterRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HostedContentFilterRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example retrieves details about the spam filter rule named Contoso Recipien ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the spam filter rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -State -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The State parameter filters the results by the state of the rule. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HybridConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HybridConfiguration.md index 2d7cd5fc46..9e64f221a2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HybridConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-HybridConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the hybrid deployment configurat ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListConfig.md index fa783a57cf..0d1ece03ec 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the IP Allow list configuration ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListEntry.md index 33954acbcb..9554627b22 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example returns an IP Allow list entry in which the specified IP address is ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity integer value of the IP Allow list entry that you want to view. When you add an entry to the IP Allow list, the Identity value is automatically assigned. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IPAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IPAddress parameter specifies an IP address to view in the IP Allow list entry or entries. For example, if you have an IP Allow list entry that specifies a range of IP addresses from 192.168.0.1 through 192.168.0.20, enter any IP address in the IP Allow list IP address range to return the IP Allow list entry. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListProvider.md index 7cc5d7d182..4c02a98691 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the IP Allow list provider named C ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Allow list provider that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Allow list provider. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md index 33845fc425..76c2a9caf3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the IP Allow list providers conf ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListConfig.md index badc1fb114..814407a7b2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the IP Block list configuration ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListEntry.md index ac6528eb90..497fb75329 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example returns machine-generated entries in the IP Block list that are ins ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity integer value of the IP Block list entry that you want to view. When you add an entry to the IP Block list, the Identity value is automatically assigned. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IPAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IPAddress parameter specifies an IP address to view in the IP Block list entry or entries. For example, if you have an IP Block list entry that specifies a range of IP addresses from 192.168.0.1 through 192.168.0.20, enter any IP address in the IP Block list IP address range to return the IP Block list entry. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListProvider.md index a6befcee10..dd1c0f63eb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the existing IP Block list provide ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Block list provider that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Block list provider. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md index f84def95bc..0360780512 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the IP Block list providers on t ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IRMConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IRMConfiguration.md index 34e73d32b3..d609d6bd9d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IRMConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IRMConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example retrieves the IRM configuration in your organization. ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ImapSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ImapSettings.md index aa7c94f41a..aa9e21ca9f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ImapSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ImapSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This example displays the settings and values of the Microsoft Exchange IMAP4 se ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-InboxRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-InboxRule.md index d534f407cd..3428804391 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-InboxRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-InboxRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example retrieves the Inbox rule ReceivedLastYear from the mailbox joe@cont ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Inbox rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassScopeCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BypassScopeCheck switch specifies whether to bypass the scope check for the user that's running the command. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DescriptionTimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DescriptionTimeFormat parameter specifies the format for time values in the rule description. For example: @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DescriptionTimeZone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DescriptionTimeZone parameter specifies time zone that's used for time values in the rule description. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeHidden -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeHidden switch specifies whether to include hidden Inbox rules in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the Inbox rule. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SweepRules -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IntraOrganizationConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IntraOrganizationConfiguration.md index c604bab845..09a889529c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IntraOrganizationConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IntraOrganizationConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IntraOrganizationConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IntraOrganizationConnector.md index e1f54a76a5..7f8893e54e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IntraOrganizationConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-IntraOrganizationConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example returns details about the Intra-Organization connector named "MainC ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Intra-Organization connector that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the connector. For example: @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-JournalRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-JournalRule.md index a5bf61f338..35a9d4bfd9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-JournalRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-JournalRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves the specific journal rule Brokerage Communications and pi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the rule you want to view. Enter either the name or the GUID of the journal rule. You can omit the parameter label. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-LogonStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-LogonStatistics.md index d64ba0f423..a0b449dff7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-LogonStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-LogonStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example returns logon statistics for all users connected to the server Serv ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox to get logon statistics from. You can use one of the following values to identify the mailbox: @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter specifies the mailbox database to get logon statistics from (all mailboxes in the specified database). You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox database. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Mailbox server to get logon statistics from (all mailboxes on all databases, including recovery databases, on the specified server). You can use one of the following values to identify the server: @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailContact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailContact.md index 95a7d4a31c..e1762e870e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailContact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailContact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ This example retrieves detailed information for the mail contact named Arlene. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail contact that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail contact. For example: @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ANR -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientTypeDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientTypeDetails parameter filters the results by the specified mail contact subtype. Valid values are: @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailPublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailPublicFolder.md index c9c71c1564..5c3de390b6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailPublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailPublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ This example returns all mail-enabled public folders that begin with the word Ma ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or public folder name that represents a specific public folder. You can also include the path using the format \\TopLevelPublicFolder\\PublicFolder. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailUser.md index 8198063763..92601103eb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the mail user named Ed. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail user that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail user. For example: @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Mailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Mailbox.md index b1f77201f7..f40d64b16c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Mailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Mailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ This example returns information about the remote archive mailbox for the user e ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Archive switch specifies whether to return only mailboxes that have an archive enabled in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuxAuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GroupMailbox switch specifies whether to return only Microsoft 365 Groups in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Migration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Migration switch specifies whether to return only migration mailboxes in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Monitoring -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolder switch specifies whether to return only public folder mailboxes in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -775,7 +775,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientTypeDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientTypeDetails parameter filters the results by the specified mailbox subtype. Valid values are: @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -871,7 +871,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -926,7 +926,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. @@ -954,7 +954,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SupervisoryReviewPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md index 909b2e8062..acbf528c80 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example returns all accounts that are configured for mailbox audit logging ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the user account or computer account where you want to view the value of the AuditBypassEnabled property. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md index 35f606e712..2b46e024e2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example retrieves Automatic Replies settings for Tony's mailbox at contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of settings to return. If you want to return all settings that match the command, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md index 4001d80f30..253bb2bb1b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ This example requests that the domain controller DC1 retrieves calendar settings ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxCalendarFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxCalendarFolder.md index c0a830aac8..6a4ba7c36a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxCalendarFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxCalendarFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example returns all provided publishing information for the specified calen ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the calendar folder that you want to view. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxDatabase.md index 91f420193f..1f12278e17 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the mailbox database named Mailb ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox database that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter filters the results by the specified Mailbox server. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DumpsterStatistics -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DumpsterStatistics switch specifies that transport dumpster statistics be returned with the database status. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeCorrupted -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludePreExchange2013 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludePreExchange2013 switch specifies whether to return information about Exchange 2010 or earlier mailbox databases. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Status switch specifies whether to retrieve the available free space in the database root and information about the following attributes: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxDatabaseCopyStatus.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxDatabaseCopyStatus.md index e4b66a20fa..14fc9d8aa4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxDatabaseCopyStatus.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxDatabaseCopyStatus.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ This example returns the status for the copy of database DB1 on the Mailbox serv ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the database copy for which the command should gather information. The Identity parameter can be specified in the form of `\`. Specifying just `` returns information for all copies of the database. This parameter can't be combined with the Server parameter. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies that a Mailbox server returns status information for all of its mailbox database copies. This parameter can't be combined with the Identity parameter. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Active -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Active switch specifies whether to return mailbox database copy status for the active mailbox database copy only. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionStatus -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Local -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Local switch specifies whether to return mailbox database copy status information from only the local Mailbox server. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedErrorInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedErrorInfo switch specifies whether to return an output object containing any exception details. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseServerCache -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseServerCache switch specifies whether to enable a server-side remote procedure call (RPC) caching of status information for 5 seconds. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxExportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxExportRequest.md index ea3af86b8e..c9dfe85b03 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxExportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxExportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ This example returns all export requests that have the name DB01toPST where the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the export request. By default, export requests are named `\MailboxExportX` (where X = 0-9). If you specified a name for the export request when the request was created using the New-MailboxExportRequest cmdlet, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. Exchange automatically precedes the request with the mailbox's alias. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BatchName parameter specifies the name given to a batch export request. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HighPriority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HighPriority parameter filters the results based on the Priority value that was assigned when the request was created. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. Here's how these values filter the results: @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies that export requests that have the specified name are returned. @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Status parameter filters the results based on status. You can use the following values: @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Suspend parameter specifies whether to return requests that have been suspended. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestQueue parameter identifies the request based on the mailbox database where the request is being run. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxExportRequestStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxExportRequestStatistics.md index 5877037fe2..20454976c2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxExportRequestStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxExportRequestStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ This example returns additional information for all the export requests that hav ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the export request. By default, export requests are named `\MailboxExportX` (where X = 0-9). If you specified a name for the export request when it was created by using the New-MailboxExportRequest cmdlet, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is for debugging purposes only. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Diagnostic switch specifies whether to return extremely detailed information in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiagnosticArgument parameter modifies the results that are returned by using the Diagnostic switch. Typically, you use the Diagnostic switch and the DiagnosticArgument parameter only at the request of Microsoft Customer Service and Support to troubleshoot problems. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeReport switch specifies whether to return additional details, which can be used for troubleshooting. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReportOnly switch returns the results as an array of report entries (encoded strings). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestGuid parameter specifies the unique identifier for the export request. To find the export request GUID, use the Get-MailboxExportRequest cmdlet. If you specify the RequestGuid parameter, you must also specify the RequestQueue parameter. You can't use this parameter with the Identity parameter. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolder.md index 681bdd6120..682f41b72f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all levels of folders under Inbox in your ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox folder that you want to view. The syntax is `[MailboxID]:[\ParentFolder][\SubFolder]`. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GetChildren -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GetChildren switch specifies whether to return only the first level of subfolders under the specified parent folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recurse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recurse switch specifies whether to return the specified parent folder and all of its subfolders. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailFolderOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailFolderOnly switch specifies whether to return only the mail folders in the specified mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolderPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolderPermission.md index 198d611d27..5ee63ba381 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolderPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolderPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example returns the permissions for the Calendar folder in John's mailbox, ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox folder that you want to view. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GroupMailbox switch is required to return Microsoft 365 Groups in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter filters the results by the specified mailbox, mail user, or mail-enabled security group (security principal) that's granted permission to the mailbox folder. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolderStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolderStatistics.md index 7bd91cd3c4..dfc0f44929 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolderStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxFolderStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ This example uses the FolderScope parameter to view inbox folders statistics for ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox or mail user. For example: @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Archive switch specifies whether to return the usage statistics of the archive associated with the mailbox or mail user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FolderScope parameter specifies the scope of the search by folder type. Valid parameter values include: @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeAnalysis -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeAnalysis switch specifies whether to scan all items within a folder and return statistics related to the folder and item size. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeOldestAndNewestItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeOldestAndNewestItems switch specifies whether to return the dates of the oldest and newest items in each folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxImportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxImportRequest.md index 0f27c0ce17..4ee78760e3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxImportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxImportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ This example returns all import requests that have the name Recovered where the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the import request. By default, import requests are named `\MailboxImportX` (where X = 0-9). If you specify a name for the import request, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. Microsoft Exchange automatically precedes the request with the mailbox's alias. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies the name given to a batch import request. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HighPriority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies that import requests that have the specified name are returned. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Status parameter filters the results based on status. You can use the following values: @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend parameter specifies whether to return requests that have been suspended. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxImportRequestStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxImportRequestStatistics.md index 9d553d04e1..7712bbbfc7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxImportRequestStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxImportRequestStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ This example returns additional information for all the import requests that hav ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the import request. By default, import requests are named `\MailboxImportX` (where X = 0-9). If you specified a name when you created the import request, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeReport switch specifies whether to return additional details, which can be used for troubleshooting. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReportOnly switch returns the results as an array of report entries (encoded strings). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md index 4f7d3ec93d..982e3fe365 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ To return all mailboxes where the junk email rule is enabled, change the value $ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: True ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxLocation.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxLocation.md index 13d0a15a7b..d731ec4912 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxLocation.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxLocation.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ In Exchange Server or Exchange Online, this example returns the mailbox location ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox location object that you want to view. The value uses the either of the following formats: @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxLocationType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailboxLocationType filters the results by the type of mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md index c198362e18..f3e799f010 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example returns the Outlook on the web settings for Tony's mailbox and spec ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credential parameter specifies the username and password to use to access the mailbox. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxPermission.md index 6a41b26466..74ca8ef07c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ This example returns the owner information for the resource mailbox Room222. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Owner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Owner switch returns the owner information for the mailbox that's specified by the Identity parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter filters the results by who has permissions to the mailbox that's specified by the Identity parameter. You can specify the following types of users or groups (security principals) for this parameter: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md index 23813b7c6f..0947fd27bf 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example returns the regional settings for Alice Jakobsen's mailbox and also ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -VerifyDefaultFolderNameLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The VerifyDefaultFolderNameLanguage switch verifies that the default folder names are localized in the language that's specified for the mailbox (the Language property value). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRepairRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRepairRequest.md index b7e31ea498..2f7356ae9a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRepairRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRepairRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ This example uses the Database and StoreMailbox parameters to display the Identi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox repair request to display information about. Mailbox repair requests are identified by a complex GUID that is created when a new mailbox repair request is created. This GUID consists of a database ID, a Request ID and a job ID. The format is `DatabaseGuid\RequestGuid\JobGuid`. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter returns mailbox repair requests for all mailboxes on the specified database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to get mailbox repair request information about. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StoreMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StoreMailbox parameter specifies the mailbox GUID of the mailbox that you want to get mailbox repair request information about. Use this parameter with the Database parameter. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Archive switch displays information about the associated archive mailbox if the archive mailbox was included when the mailbox repair request was created. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Detailed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE Use the Detailed parameter to display mailbox-level repair tasks associated with the repair request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRestoreRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRestoreRequest.md index 9f68aae6cd..cec72542e6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRestoreRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRestoreRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ This example returns all restore requests that have the name RestoreToMBD01 wher ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the restore request. The Identity parameter consists of the alias of the mailbox to be restored and the name that was specified when the restore request was created. The identity of the restore request uses the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies the name given to a batch of restore requests. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HighPriority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HighPriority parameter filters the results based on the Priority value that was assigned when the request was created. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. Here's how these values filter the results: @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies that any restore request that has the specified name is returned. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Status parameter filters the results based on status. You can use the following values: @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend parameter specifies whether to return requests that have been suspended. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the identity of the target mailbox. You can use the following values: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRestoreRequestStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRestoreRequestStatistics.md index 9ef9b9e6e7..0420909f8f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRestoreRequestStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxRestoreRequestStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ This example returns additional information for all the restore requests that ha ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the restore request. The Identity parameter consists of the alias of the mailbox to be restored and the name that was specified when the restore request was created. The identity of the restore request uses the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeReport switch specifies whether to return additional details, which can be used for troubleshooting. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReportOnly switch returns the results as an array of report entries (encoded strings). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxSearch.md index 1dd6099661..98b2f45979 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Get-MailboxSearch "Project Hamilton" | Format-List This example retrieves all properties for the mailbox search Project Hamilton. -The Identity parameter is a positional parameter. Positional parameters can be used without the label (Identity). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). +The Identity parameter is positional, which means you can use it without the -Identity label in the supported location in the command (in this case, first). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). ### Example 3 ```powershell @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ This example retrieves the In-Place Holds that a user is placed on. The first co ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the search query. If a name isn't provided, all mailbox search queries are returned. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InPlaceHoldIdentity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InPlaceHoldIdentity parameter specifies the GUID of an In-Place Hold. Use this parameter to search for an In-Place Hold that a user is placed on. GUIDs of all In-Place Holds that a user is placed on are added to the user's InPlaceHolds property. You can retrieve the property by using the Get-Mailbox cmdlet. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowDeletionInProgressSearches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxServer.md index 4c6925717f..ec9c99d48b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the Mailbox server named Server1 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Mailbox server that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Mailbox server. For example: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Status switch specifies whether to include additional property values in the results, for example, the Locale value. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md index fc0ca8f8a2..ba8137229d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example returns the Outlook on the web spelling checker options for Tony's ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxStatistics.md index fa20e834d4..6d6ca0714b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ This example returns the detailed move history and a verbose detailed move repor ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to return statistics for. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StoreMailboxIdentity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Archive switch specifies whether to return mailbox statistics for the archive mailbox that's associated with the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyOnServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeMoveHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeMoveHistory switch specifies whether to return additional information about the mailbox that includes the history of a completed move request, such as status, flags, target database, bad items, start times, end times, duration that the move request was in various stages, and failure codes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeMoveReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeMoveReport switch specifies whether to return a verbose detailed move report for a completed move request, such as server connections and move stages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludePassive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeQuarantineDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NoADLookup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxTransportService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxTransportService.md index d93f8c7443..6baf5e6e72 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxTransportService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxTransportService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves the detailed transport configuration information for the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server that you want to view. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxUserConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxUserConfiguration.md index c5a73d9071..20cc71b95a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxUserConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MailboxUserConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the specified user configuration i ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the user configuration item that you want to view. This parameter uses the syntax MailboxFolder\ItemName: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the user configuration items you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilterPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilterPolicy.md index 70fc40e4e3..fe9000d741 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilterPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilterPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves detailed configuration information for the malware filter ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter policy that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the malware filter policy. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilterRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilterRule.md index 851fe8bee1..7b16455434 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilterRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilterRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example retrieves detailed configuration information for the malware filter ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the malware filter rule. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -State -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The State parameter filters the results by enabled or disabled malware filter rules. Valid input for this parameter is Enabled or Disabled. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilteringServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilteringServer.md index a5aa694930..53a20c6cae 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilteringServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MalwareFilteringServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example returns the detailed Exchange Malware agent settings on a Mailbox s ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server where you want to view the anti-malware settings. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md index 7c810e181a..04ff9158a5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Get-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy "PM Storage Template" This example returns all the attributes of the managed folder mailbox policy PM Storage Template. -The Identity parameter is a positional parameter. Positional parameters can be used without the label (Identity). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). +The Identity parameter is positional, which means you can use it without the -Identity label in the supported location in the command (in this case, first). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). ## PARAMETERS diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRole.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRole.md index 67b161bb48..c5b12d0a70 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRole.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRole.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ This example lists the immediate children of the Mail Recipients role. Only the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role you want to view. If the role you want to view contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). You can use the wildcard character (\*) and a partial role name to match multiple roles. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GetChildren -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The GetChildren parameter retrieves a list of all the roles that were created based on the parent role specified in the Identity parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recurse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Recurse parameter retrieves a list of all the roles that were created based on the parent role specified in the Identity parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Cmdlet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Cmdlet parameter returns a list of all roles that include the specified cmdlet. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CmdletParameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The CmdletParameters parameter returns a list of all roles that include the specified parameter or parameters. You can specify more than one parameter by separating each parameter with a comma. If you specify multiple parameters, only the roles that include all of the specified parameters are returned. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoleType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The RoleType parameter returns a list of roles that match the specified role type. For a list of valid role types, see [Understanding management roles](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/understanding-management-roles-exchange-2013-help). @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Script -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Script parameter returns a list of all roles that include the specified script. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ScriptParameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ScriptParameters parameter returns a list of all roles that include the specified parameter or parameters. You can specify more than one parameter by separating each parameter with a comma. If you specify multiple parameters, only the roles that include all of the specified parameters are returned. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRoleAssignment.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRoleAssignment.md index e3ee03a9c7..c9ef714304 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRoleAssignment.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRoleAssignment.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ This example retrieves all the role assignments that can modify the database Con ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the role assignment to retrieve. If the name of the role assignment contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). If the RoleAssignee parameter is used, you can't use the Identity parameter. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssignmentMethod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AssignmentMethod parameter specifies the type of role assignment to include in the results returned by the cmdlet. You can specify one or more of the following values: @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConfigWriteScope parameter specifies the type of management configuration scope to include in the results returned by the cmdlet. The valid values are None, OrganizationConfig, CustomConfigScope, and ExclusiveConfigScope. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomRecipientWriteScope parameter returns only the regular role assignments that include the specified recipient-based regular scope. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Delegating -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Delegating parameter specifies whether delegating or regular role assignments should be returned. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether enabled or disabled role assignments should be returned. To return enabled role assignments, specify a value of $true. To return disabled role assignments, specify a value of $false. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Exclusive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Exclusive parameter specifies whether exclusive or regular role assignments should be returned. @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameter returns only the exclusive role assignments that include the specified recipient-based exclusive scope. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GetEffectiveUsers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GetEffectiveUsers switch specifies that the command should show the list of users in the role groups, role assignment policies, or USGs that are associated with the role assignment. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAdministrativeUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameter returns only the role assignments that include the specified organizational unit (OU). If the OU tree contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientWriteScope parameter returns only the role assignments associated with the recipient scope restriction type specified. The valid values are None, MyGAL, Self, OU, CustomRecipientScope, MyDistributionGroups and ExclusiveRecipientScope. @@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Role parameter returns only the role assignments associated with the specified management role. If the name of the role contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoleAssignee -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RoleAssignee parameter specifies the role group, assignment policy, user, or universal security group (USG) for which you want to view role assignments. If the RoleAssignee parameter is used, you can't use the Identity parameter. @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoleAssigneeType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RoleAssigneeType parameter specifies the type of role assignee to return. The valid values are User, SecurityGroup, RoleAssignmentPolicy, ForeignSecurityPrincipal, RoleGroup, LinkedRoleGroup and Computer. @@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WritableDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WritableRecipient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WritableRecipient parameter specifies the recipient object you want to test to determine which role assignments allow it to be modified. The command takes into account the roles and scopes associated with each role assignment. If the recipient name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WritableServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRoleEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRoleEntry.md index 6069d86005..2653a15989 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRoleEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementRoleEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ This example retrieves the Tier 2 Help Desk\\Set-Mailbox role entry and pipes th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role entry that you want to view. This parameter uses the syntax: `\` (for example, `CustomRole\Set-Mailbox`). @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Parameters parameter includes only the role entries that contain the parameters specified. You can specify multiple parameters, separated by commas. You can use the wildcard character (\*) with partial parameter names to retrieve all parameters that match the value you specify. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PSSnapinName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PSSnapinName parameter specifies the Windows PowerShell snap-in that contains the role entry to return. Use the Get-PSSnapin cmdlet to retrieve a list of available Windows PowerShell snap-ins. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Type parameter specifies the type of role entry to return. The valid values for the Type parameter are any combination of the following parameters, separated by commas: Cmdlet, Script and ApplicationPermission. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementScope.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementScope.md index e3d35c1cde..3b5949b7df 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementScope.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ManagementScope.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example retrieves a list of exclusive scopes. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the management scope to return. If the management scope name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Exclusive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Exclusive parameter specifies whether exclusive scopes should be returned. If the Exclusive parameter isn't specified, regular scopes and exclusive scopes are returned. If the Exclusive parameter is set to $True, only exclusive scopes are returned. If the Exclusive parameter is set to $False, only regular scopes are returned. The valid values are $True and $False. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Orphan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Orphan switch specifies whether to return only management scopes that aren't associated with role assignments. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MapiVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MapiVirtualDirectory.md index 8d63f79498..572f31c8f5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MapiVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MapiVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all MAPI virtual directories in the clien ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the MAPI virtual directory that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADPropertiesOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ADPropertiesOnly switch specifies whether to return only the virtual directory properties that are stored in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Message.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Message.md index 2aa1848340..3ce55a4842 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Message.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Message.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ This example displays all messages queued on the server named Server01. The resu ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the message. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue\\MessageInteger or Queue\\MessageInteger or MessageInteger, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com\\5 or 10. For details about message identity, see [Message identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#message-identity). @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookmarkIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BookmarkIndex parameter specifies the position in the result set where the displayed results start. The value of this parameter is a 1-based index in the total result set. The BookmarkIndex parameter can't be used with the BookmarkObject parameter. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookmarkObject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BookmarkObject parameter specifies the object in the result set where the displayed results start. The BookmarkObject parameter can't be used with the BookmarkIndex parameter. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more messages by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a message property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"FromAddress -like '*@contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable message properties and comparison operators, see [Properties of messages in queues](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/message-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeBookmark -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeBookmark parameter specifies whether to include the bookmark object when the query results are displayed. The IncludeBookmark parameter is valid when it's used with the BookmarkObject or BookmarkIndex parameters. If you don't specify a value for the IncludeBookmark parameter, the default value of $true is used. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeComponentLatencyInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeComponentLatencyInfo switch specifies whether the information about component latency is included in the message properties. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeRecipientInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeRecipientInfo switch specifies whether to display the message recipients in the Recipients field. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Queue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Queue parameter specifies the identity of the queue that contains the messages that you want to display. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax `\` or ``, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com or Unreachable. For details about queue identity, see the "Queue identity" section in [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#queue-identity). @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReturnPageInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReturnPageInfo parameter is a hidden parameter. Use it to return information about the total number of results and the index of the first object of the current page. The default value is $false. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchForward -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SearchForward parameter specifies whether to search forward or backward in the result set. The default value is $true. This value causes the result page to be calculated forward from either the start of the result set or forward from a bookmark if specified. @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortOrder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SortOrder parameter specifies an array of message properties used to control the sort order of the result set. Separate each property by using a comma. Prepend a plus sign (+) symbol to the beginning of the property name to display the results in ascending order. Prepend a minus sign (-) symbol to the beginning of the property name to display the results in descending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageCategory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageCategory.md index 3eaf7fb54c..fdd042b6bd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageCategory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageCategory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example retrieves message categories from the mailbox User1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the message category to be retrieved. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageClassification.md index 4dc5651fcc..b1e4ff3155 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example lists all message classifications in your organization. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the message classification that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the message classification. For example: @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeLocales -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeLocales switch specifies whether to return message classification locale information in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageTrackingLog.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageTrackingLog.md index d2f4eae656..c97f3baf2a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageTrackingLog.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageTrackingLog.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ This example searches the message tracking logs on the Mailbox server named Mail ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -End -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The End parameter specifies the end date and time of the date range. Message delivery information is returned up to, but not including, the specified date and time. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EventId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EventId parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the value of the EventId field. The EventId value classifies each message event. Example values include DSN, Defer, Deliver, Send, or Receive. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMessageId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMessageId parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the value of the InternalMessageId field. The InternalMessageId value is a message identifier that's assigned by the Exchange server that's currently processing the message. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageId parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the value of the MessageId field. The value of MessageId corresponds to the value of the Message-Id: header field in the message. If the Message-ID header field is blank or doesn't exist, an arbitrary value is assigned. Be sure to include the full MessageId string (which might include angle brackets) and enclose the value in quotation marks (for example, ""). @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageSubject parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the value of the message subject. The value of the MessageSubject parameter automatically supports partial matches without using wildcards or special characters. For example, if you specify the MessageSubject value sea, the results include messages with Seattle in the subject. By default, message subjects are stored in the message tracking logs. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Recipients parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the SMTP email address of the message recipients. Multiple recipients in a single message are logged in a single message tracking log entry. Unexpanded distribution group recipients are logged by using the group's SMTP email address. You can specify multiple recipients using an array of email addresses. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Reference -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Reference parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the value of the Reference field. The Reference field contains additional information for specific types of events. For example, the Reference field value for a DSN message tracking entry contains the InternalMessageId value of the message that caused the DSN. For many types of events, the value of Reference is blank. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Sender -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Sender parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the sender's SMTP email address. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Start -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Start parameter specifies the start date and time of the date range. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NetworkMessageId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NetworkMessageId parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the value of the NetworkMessageId field. This field contains a unique message ID value that persists across copies of the message that might be created due to bifurcation or distribution group expansion. An example value is 1341ac7b13fb42ab4d4408cf7f55890f. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Source -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Source parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the value of the Source field. These values indicate the transport component that's responsible for the message tracking event. For more information, see [Source values in the message tracking log](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/transport-logs/message-tracking#source-values-in-the-message-tracking-log). @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportTrafficType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportTrafficType parameter filters the message tracking log entries by the value of the TransportTrafficType field. However, this field isn't interesting for on-premises Exchange organizations. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageTrackingReport.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageTrackingReport.md index 67532cc6d9..dbe1ef3dea 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageTrackingReport.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MessageTrackingReport.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example searches the message tracking data for the specific message trackin ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the message tracking report ID that you want to view. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassDelegateChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BypassDelegateChecking switch allows Help desk staff and administrators to retrieve message tracking reports for any user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DetailLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DetailLevel parameter specifies the amount of detail to return in the results. Valid values are: @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DoNotResolve -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DoNotResolve switch specifies whether to prevent the resolution of email addresses to display names. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientPathFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientPathFilter parameter specifies the email address of the recipient when you use the ReportTemplate parameter with the value RecipientPath. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipients parameter specifies the email addresses of the recipients when you use the ReportTemplate parameter with the value Summary. You can specify multiple email addresses separated by commas. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReportTemplate parameter specifies a predefined format for the output. Valid values are: @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Status parameter filters the results by the specified delivery status codes. Valid values are: @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TraceLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TraceLevel parameter specifies the details to include in the results. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationBatch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationBatch.md index fb5ffbccec..0c0ec8d88d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationBatch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationBatch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ This example displays information about all migration batches associated with th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter identifies the name of the current migration batch. The value for this parameter is specified by the Name parameter of the New-MigrationBatch cmdlet. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Endpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Endpoint parameter returns a list of migration batches associated with the specified migration endpoint. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeReport switch returns additional information about the specified migration batch. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Status parameter returns a list of migration batches that have the specified status state. Use one of the following values: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationConfig.md index a256dc66ad..e9547ccb5c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationEndpoint.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationEndpoint.md index 3ea33df985..31f0965b95 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationEndpoint.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationEndpoint.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ This example retrieves the settings for the migration endpoint, OnboardingME01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the migration endpoint you want to retrieve settings for. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Type parameter filters the results by the type of migration. Valid values for this parameter are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationStatistics.md index 05587e4c0a..316105390a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example returns the default statistics for the migration batches. ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationUser.md index 4f85b2de43..b152b9d8ca 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ This example retrieves more detailed information about any ongoing migration for ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the particular ongoing migration that you want to retrieve information about. The Identity parameter is usually represented as an email address. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailboxGuid parameter specifies the GUID of a mailbox for which you want to view the migration information. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchId parameter specifies the name of the migration batch for which you want to return users. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Status parameter returns information about migration users that have the specified status state. Use one of the following values: @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusSummary -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatusSummary parameter returns abbreviated information about migration users that have the specified status value. Use one of the following values: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationUserStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationUserStatistics.md index cc7cf9ad2f..8b8cc0bd56 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationUserStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MigrationUserStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example uses the Diagnostic parameter to display d ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the user that you want to retrieve migration information about. Use an email address as the value for this parameter. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeReport switch specifies whether to return additional details, which can be used for troubleshooting. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeSkippedItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeSkippedItems switch specifies whether to include skipped items for the user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LimitSkippedItemsTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LimitSkippedItemsTo parameter specifies the maximum number of skipped items to display information about in the SkippedItems property in command output. For example, if this parameter is set to 5, the cmdlet returns information for up to five skipped items for the specified user, even if there are more than five skipped items. @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipSubscription -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipSubscription switch specifies whether to skip loading the subscription for the user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDevice.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDevice.md index d54fc9963c..0a6ffc561b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDevice.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDevice.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the specified device on Lila's m ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device that you want to view. You can use the following values that uniquely identifies the mobile device: @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter filters the results by mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSync switch filters the results by Exchange ActiveSync devices. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Monitoring -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAforDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAforDevices switch filters the results by whether Outlook on the web for devices is enabled for the device. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RestApi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RestApi switch filters the results by REST API devices. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UniversalOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UniversalOutlook switch filters the results by Mail and Calendar devices. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md index ce8b3ca55f..565645f4d4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example returns the policy settings for the Mobile Device mailbox policy De ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the policy name. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDeviceStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDeviceStatistics.md index ae8aeb20f0..5d6f6c1c20 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDeviceStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MobileDeviceStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ This example retrieves the statistics for the mobile phone that's configured to ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device that you want to view. You can use the following values that uniquely identifies the mobile device: @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter filters the results by the user mailbox that's associated with the mobile device. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSync switch filters the results by Exchange ActiveSync devices. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GetMailboxLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GetMailboxLog switch specifies whether to send the mobile device statistics to the email addresses that are specified by the NotificationEmailAddresses parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotificationEmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NotificationEmailAddresses parameter specifies a comma-separated list of email addresses to receive the mobile device statistics when you use the GetMailboxLog switch. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAforDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAforDevices switch filters the results by devices where Outlook on the web for devices is enabled. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowRecoveryPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowRecoveryPassword switch specifies whether to return the recovery password for the mobile device as one of the displayed statistics. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RestApi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RestApi switch filters the results by REST API devices. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UniversalOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UniversalOutlook switch filters the results by Mail and Calendar devices. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MonitoringItemHelp.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MonitoringItemHelp.md index 738fa466ce..0f30abca7c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MonitoringItemHelp.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MonitoringItemHelp.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example retrieves health set information for a monitoring item on the serve ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the monitoring item. The parameter uses the syntax: `\[\]`. You can find the available values in the Identity property of the output of the Get-MonitoringItem cmdlet. @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that contains the monitoring item. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MonitoringItemIdentity.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MonitoringItemIdentity.md index 3ac2e98fc2..5ed8bba101 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MonitoringItemIdentity.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MonitoringItemIdentity.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example returns information about the health set named OutlookMapiHttp.Prox ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the health set that you want to view. To see the list of available health sets, you can use the Get-ServerHealth or Get-HealthReport cmdlets. @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that contains the health set. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MoveRequest.md index 34a6e39394..7ecd1bd9a6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ This example retrieves the status of move requests in the FromDB01ToDB02 batch t ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the move request, which is the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox or mail user. For example: @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies the name that was given to a batch move request. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Flags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Flags parameter specifies the move type to retrieve information for. Valid value are: @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HighPriority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeSoftDeletedObjects -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveStatus -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MoveStatus parameter returns move requests in the specified status. You can use the following values: @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Offline -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Offline parameter specifies whether to return mailboxes that are being moved in offline mode. This parameter accepts $true or $false. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Protect -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteHostName parameter specifies the FQDN of the cross-forest organization from which you're moving the mailbox. @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. @@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend parameter specifies whether to return mailboxes with moves that have been suspended. This parameter accepts $true or $false. @@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendWhenReadytoComplete parameter specifies whether to return mailboxes that have been moved with the New-MoveRequest command and its SuspendWhenReadyToComplete switch. This parameter accepts $true or $false. @@ -559,7 +559,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MoveRequestStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MoveRequestStatistics.md index b3d60fea23..818b63f0d8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MoveRequestStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-MoveRequestStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ This example exports the move request information so you can later import it int ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use one of the following values: @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveRequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeReport switch specifies whether to return additional details, which can be used for troubleshooting. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-NetworkConnectionInfo.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-NetworkConnectionInfo.md index 65e665e779..b405db7a1f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-NetworkConnectionInfo.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-NetworkConnectionInfo.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example retrieves network configuration information for all network adapter ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server you want to query. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Notification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Notification.md index 88a4d4185b..b960600134 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Notification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Notification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ This example displays detailed information for the specified notification event. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the notification event that you want to view. You identify the notification event by its AlternativeID property value (a GUID). You can find this value by running the command Get-Notification | Format-List DisplayName,AlternateID,StartTime,Status,Type. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Settings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProcessType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProcessType parameter filters the results by the type of notification event. Valid values are: @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Summary -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Summary switch includes only the ProcessType and Status property values in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OabVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OabVirtualDirectory.md index 8cad368b7a..0411b0f962 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OabVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OabVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the OAB virtual directory named "O ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the OAB virtual directory that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADPropertiesOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ADPropertiesOnly switch specifies whether to return only the virtual directory properties that are stored in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories switch shows information about backend virtual directories on Mailbox servers. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OfflineAddressBook.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OfflineAddressBook.md index 299ffe54d0..b5c271b429 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OfflineAddressBook.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OfflineAddressBook.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example returns specific properties for all existing OABs, including the Ge ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the OAB that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OAB. For example: @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OnlineMeetingConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OnlineMeetingConfiguration.md index 402cc08950..4cec7f369b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OnlineMeetingConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OnlineMeetingConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example gets the Skype Meetings configuration for the specified mailbox. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationConfig.md index d269f440c7..2da5c4b45a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ If the value of EwsApplicationAccessPolicy is EnforceBlockList, all applications ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationRelationship.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationRelationship.md index 7effe3c9ad..4c576ed8d4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationRelationship.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationRelationship.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example retrieves the organization relationship settings by using the FQDN ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the organizational relationship. You can use the following values: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationalUnit.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationalUnit.md index 35252328c5..0ad6645a48 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationalUnit.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OrganizationalUnit.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ For more information about pipelining and the Format-Table cmdlet, see [About Pi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the OU or domain that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeContainers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeContainers switch instructs the command to return containers in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SingleNodeOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SingleNodeOnly switch instructs the command to return only the first level child OUs beneath the OU specified in the Identity parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SearchText parameter enables you to search the names of all OUs in your organization for the specified string. Only the OUs that match the string you specify are returned. If the string you specify contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookAnywhere.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookAnywhere.md index 112de05d73..84da3e4ffd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookAnywhere.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookAnywhere.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example returns information about the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory na ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADPropertiesOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ADPropertiesOnly switch specifies whether to return only the virtual directory properties that are stored in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories switch shows information about backend virtual directories on Mailbox servers. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookProtectionRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookProtectionRule.md index c6efe5855d..dbe9cc5f7e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookProtectionRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookProtectionRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ The Identity parameter is positional. When used after the cmdlet name, the param ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter identifies an Outlook protection rule. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookProvider.md index d399eecb7f..1c4402fee5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OutlookProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the Outlook provider named WEB. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ADIDParameter value of the MAPI protocol that you want to view. Typical values are: @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OwaMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OwaMailboxPolicy.md index 6e68f829bf..835a172b5c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OwaMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OwaMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example retrieves the information for the mailbox policy named Corporate fo ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox policy that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OwaVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OwaVirtualDirectory.md index e918994ed0..1595552983 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OwaVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-OwaVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all Outlook on the web virtual directorie ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the OWA virtual directory that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADPropertiesOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ADPropertiesOnly switch specifies whether to return only the virtual directory properties that are stored in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories switch shows information about backend virtual directories on Mailbox servers. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PartnerApplication.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PartnerApplication.md index 51e6a7a743..2c16113aca 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PartnerApplication.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PartnerApplication.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example retrieves settings for all partner applications configured in Excha ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of a partner application. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Organization -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PendingFederatedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PendingFederatedDomain.md index 1b57b6d5c1..8297d834ea 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PendingFederatedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PendingFederatedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PolicyTipConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PolicyTipConfig.md index 2ac670e3e4..fddb48a8f3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PolicyTipConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PolicyTipConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example returns details about the custom English Policy Tip for the action ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the custom Policy Tip you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the custom Policy Tip. For example: @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Action parameter filters the Policy Tips by action. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Locale parameter specifies a locale-specific version of the Policy Tip. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Original -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Original switch specifies whether to include built-in Policy Tips in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PopSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PopSettings.md index d140d3fa03..706330731d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PopSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PopSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the Microsoft Exchange POP3 servic ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md index 4324161baf..328b56bf0b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all PowerShell virtual directories in the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the PowerShell virtual directory that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADPropertiesOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ADPropertiesOnly switch specifies whether to return only the virtual directory properties that are stored in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories switch shows information about backend virtual directories on Mailbox servers. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolder.md index aeeccce66a..6c9add4dfd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ This example returns the public folders that reside in the public folder content ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name and path of the public folder you want to view. A valid value uses the syntax: `\Level1\Level2\...\LevenN\PublicFolder`. For example, `"\Customer Discussion"` or `"\Engineering\Customer Discussion"`. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GetChildren -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GetChildren switch specifies whether to return only the children of the folder specified by the Identity parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recurse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recurse switch specifies whether to return the specified public folder and all its children. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LostAndFound -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LostAndFound switch specifies whether to return only orphaned folders that are located in \\NON\_IPM\_SUBTREE\\LOST\_AND\_FOUND. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the identity of the hierarchy public folder mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Organization -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResidentFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResidentFolders switch specifies whether to return public folders that reside in a specific content public folder mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. The default maximum is 10,000. For no limit on the returned results, set this parameter to Unlimited. This parameter can only be passed in combination with the Recurse or GetChildren parameters. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderClientPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderClientPermission.md index 2b1aef2051..5eac0aa6f6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderClientPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderClientPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example retrieves the permissions for the public folder My Public Folder, f ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or public folder name that represents a specific public folder. You can also include the path using the format \\TopLevelPublicFolder\\PublicFolder. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter specifies the user for whom you want to view the permissions on the public folder. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the public folder mailbox that you want to view the permissions for. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderDatabase.md index 4e6b5127ba..4f590bdc8e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example returns information about all public folders on Server01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the public folder database that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter filters the results by the specified Exchange server. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Status switch specifies whether to include additional backup and mount status information for servers running Exchange 2010. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeCorrupted -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderItemStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderItemStatistics.md index 877ef36542..cbc33d3800 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderItemStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderItemStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example exports the output of the Get-PublicFolderItemStatistics command to ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or public folder name that represents a specific public folder. You can also include the path using the following format: \\TopLevelPublicFolder\\PublicFolder @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the identity of the hierarchy public folder mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxDiagnostics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxDiagnostics.md index 3c19ede799..e818298491 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxDiagnostics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxDiagnostics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example returns the diagnostic information for the public folder mailbox Sa ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the public folder mailbox. The public folder mailbox is where the content of the public folder resides. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeDumpsterInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeDumpsterInfo specifies whether to include diagnostic information for the \\NON\_IPM\_TREE\\DUMPSTER\_ROOT folder (the dumpster for public folder mailboxes is included in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeHierarchyInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeHierarchyInfo switch specifies whether to include folder hierarchy information in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md index ab22880711..2bf548c962 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ This example returns duplicate public folder migration requests (requests create ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the public folder mailbox migration request that you want to view. The value uses the syntax: `\PublicFolderMailboxMigration` (for example, `\PublicFolderMailboxMigrationac6d9eb4-ee49-405f-b90d-04e9a258bd7e`). @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter filters the results by the friendly BatchName value that was assigned when the batch job was created. The format of this value is: `MigrationService:`. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HighPriority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the public folder mailbox migration request. If the name was not specified at creation, the default value is `PublicFolderMailboxMigration` (for example, `PublicFolderMailboxMigration2ffdef13-01b9-4586-af2b-d5a5482010a8`). @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Status parameter filters the results based on status. You can use the following values: @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend parameter specifies whether to return requests that have been suspended. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequestStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequestStatistics.md index 39bb0267b1..b2aa35b5b9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequestStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequestStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ This example uses the Identity parameter to return information about the specifi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the public folder mailbox migration request. The default identity value is `\PublicFolderMailboxMigration` (for example, `PublicFolderMailboxMigrationac6d9eb4-ee49-405f-b90d-04e9a258bd7e`). @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeReport switch specifies whether to return additional details, which can be used for troubleshooting. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReportOnly switch returns the results as an array of report entries (encoded strings). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md index 0bd6706de5..39b9e08d9a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example returns all migration requests that have the name PFMigrate10\_11\_ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the public folder migration request that you want to view. You can use the following values: @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BatchName parameter specifies the name that was given to a batch migration request. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HighPriority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HighPriority parameter filters the results based on the Priority value that was assigned when the request was created. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. Here's how these values filter the results: @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter filters the results by the name of the public folder migration request. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestQueue parameter identifies the request based on the mailbox database where the request is being run. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Status parameter filters the results based on status. You can use the following values: @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Suspend parameter specifies whether to return requests that have been suspended. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequestStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequestStatistics.md index 9345f6dc9f..500b1ab3dd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequestStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequestStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example returns additional information about the migration request and expo ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the migration request that you want to view. You can use the following values: @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is for debugging purposes only. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Diagnostic switch specifies whether to return extremely detailed information in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiagnosticArgument parameter modifies the results that are returned by using the Diagnostic switch. Typically, you use the Diagnostic switch and the DiagnosticArgument parameter only at the request of Microsoft Customer Service and Support to troubleshoot problems. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeReport switch specifies whether to return additional details, which can be used for troubleshooting. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReportOnly switch returns the results as an array of report entries (encoded strings). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestGuid parameter specifies the GUID of a migration request. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md index 61e9261c2b..1c8e001ecc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example returns the status of in-progress and queued requests that are on t ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the public folder move request. The default identity assigned to public folder move requests is \\PublicFolderMove. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies the name that was given to a batch public folder move request. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HighPriority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HighPriority parameter filters the results based on the Priority value that was assigned when the request was created. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. Here's how these values filter the results: @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the public folder move request. If you didn't specify a name when creating the move request, PublicFolderMove is the default name assigned to the request. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestQueue parameter identifies the request based on the mailbox database where the request is being run. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Status -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Status parameter filters the results based on status. You can use the following values: @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend parameter specifies whether to return requests that have been suspended. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMoveRequestStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMoveRequestStatistics.md index a2987dd3dc..69f5e45fee 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMoveRequestStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderMoveRequestStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example returns the detailed statistics for the move request \\PublicFolder ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the public folder move request. The default public folder move request identity is \\PublicFolderMove. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is for debugging purposes only. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Diagnostic switch specifies whether to return extremely detailed information in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticArgument -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiagnosticArgument parameter modifies the results that are returned by using the Diagnostic switch. Typically, you use the Diagnostic switch and the DiagnosticArgument parameter only at the request of Microsoft Customer Service and Support to troubleshoot problems. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeReport switch specifies whether to return additional details, which can be used for troubleshooting. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReportOnly switch returns the results as an array of report entries (encoded strings). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestGuid parameter specifies the GUID of the public folder move request for which you want to view the request statistics. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderStatistics.md index 51087f7a02..d08bcc2f72 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-PublicFolderStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example retrieves statistics about the public folder Marketing\\2013\\Pamph ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or public folder name that represents a specific public folder. You can also include the path using the format \\TopLevelPublicFolder\\PublicFolder. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the identity of the hierarchy public folder mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Queue.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Queue.md index 02f901b65b..87030c6e7f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Queue.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Queue.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ This example lists only the external queues. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the queue. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue or Queue, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com or Unreachable. For details about queue identity, see [Queue identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#queue-identity). @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookmarkIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BookmarkIndex parameter specifies the position in the result set where the displayed results start. The value of this parameter is a 1-based index in the total result set. The BookmarkIndex parameter can't be used with the BookmarkObject parameter. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookmarkObject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BookmarkObject parameter specifies the object in the result set where the displayed results start. The BookmarkObject parameter can't be used with the BookmarkIndex parameter. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Exclude -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Exclude parameter specifies the types of queues you want to exclude from the results. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more queues by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a queue property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"NextHopDomain -eq 'contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable queue properties and comparison operators, see [Queue properties in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queue-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Include -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Include parameter specifies the types of queues you want to include the results. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeBookmark -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeBookmark parameter specifies whether to include the bookmark object when the query results are displayed. The IncludeBookmark parameter is valid when it's used with the BookmarkObject or BookmarkIndex parameters. If you don't specify a value for the IncludeBookmark parameter, the default value of $true is used. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReturnPageInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReturnPageInfo parameter is a hidden parameter. Use it to return information about the total number of results and the index of the first object of the current page. The default value is $false. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchForward -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SearchForward parameter specifies whether to search forward or backward in the result set. The default value is $true. This value causes the result page to be calculated forward from either the start of the result set or forward from a bookmark if specified. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortOrder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SortOrder parameter specifies an array of message properties used to control the sort order of the result set. Separate each property by using a comma. Prepend a plus sign (+) symbol to the beginning of the property name to display the results in ascending order. Prepend a minus sign (-) symbol to the beginning of the property name to display the results in descending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-QueueDigest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-QueueDigest.md index 3e658ea466..e71a73e68b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-QueueDigest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-QueueDigest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ This example returns information about all queues in the DAG named DAG01. ### -Dag -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Dag parameter filters the delivery queue results by DAG. You can specify any value that uniquely identifies the DAG. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Forest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Forest switch filters the delivery queue results by Active Directory forest. You don't need to specify a value with the Forest switch. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter filters the delivery queue results by Exchange server. You can specify any value that uniquely identifies the server. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Site -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Site parameter filters the delivery queue results by Active Directory site. You can specify any value that uniquely identifies the site. You can specify multiple sites separated by commas. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DetailsLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DetailsLevel parameter specifies the level of detail to display in the results. Valid values for this parameter are None, Normal and Verbose. The default value is Normal. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more queues by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a queue property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"NextHopDomain -eq 'contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable queue properties and comparison operators, see [Queue properties in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queue-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GroupedBy parameter sorts the messages in the delivery queue results. Valid values are: @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter filters the delivery queue results by the number of messages in the queue. Valid input for this parameter is an integer. The default value is 1000. For example, if you specify the value 50, the command displays the 50 queues that contain the most messages. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Timeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Timeout parameter specifies the number of seconds before the operation times out. The default value is 10 seconds. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RMSTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RMSTemplate.md index dcd9a4ad30..b40d1b10ac 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RMSTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RMSTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example retrieves the Company Confidential RMS template. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the RMS template. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ReceiveConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ReceiveConnector.md index 1405cdb418..eb4b435b49 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ReceiveConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ReceiveConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example displays detailed information for the Receive connector named Recei ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Receive connector that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Receive connector. For example: @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter filters the results by the specified Mailbox server or Edge Transport server. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Recipient.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Recipient.md index fb5e831977..a3b965ac4a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Recipient.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Recipient.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ This example retrieves information about all the mail contacts in your organizat ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the recipient object that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookmarkDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeBookmarkObject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeSoftDeletedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IncludeSoftDeletedRecipients switch specifies whether to include soft deleted recipients in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Properties -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PropertySet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientPreviewFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientPreviewFilter parameter tests a recipient filter that you would use in a dynamic distribution group, address list, or email address policy. This parameter uses the LDAP filter syntax. @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientType parameter filters the results by the specified recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientTypeDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientTypeDetails parameter filters the results by the specified recipient subtype. Valid values are: @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RecipientFilterConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RecipientFilterConfig.md index bba82d81ec..2daa8baa62 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RecipientFilterConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RecipientFilterConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the recipient filter configurati ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RecoverableItems.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RecoverableItems.md index 8d5b5d87bb..f7cdee932f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RecoverableItems.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RecoverableItems.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ This example returns all of the available recoverable deleted messages with the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the deleted items that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EntryID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EntryID parameter specifies the deleted item that you want to restore. The EntryID value for the deleted item is unique in the mailbox. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterEndTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FilterEndTime specifies the end date/time of the date range. This parameter uses the LastModifiedTime value of the item. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterItemType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FilterItemType parameter filters the results by the specified MessageClass (ItemClass) property value of the deleted item. For example: @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterStartTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FilterStartTime specifies the start date/time of the date range. This parameter uses the LastModifiedTime value of the item. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastParentFolderID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LastParentFolderID parameter specifies the FolderID value of the item before it was deleted. For example, 53B93149989CA54DBC9702AE619B9CCA000062CE9397. @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceFolder parameter specifies where to search for deleted items in the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectContains parameter filters the items by the specified text value in the Subject field. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RemoteDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RemoteDomain.md index 7244b020da..40f8322e49 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RemoteDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RemoteDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example returns all domains where Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (T ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the remote domain that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the remote domain. For example: @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RemoteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RemoteMailbox.md index b68d619e0f..98107afa9a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RemoteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RemoteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ First, run the following command to prompt you for your credentials and then sto ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the remote mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the remote mailbox. For example: @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Archive switch is required to return the user's archive mailbox in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesOrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OnPremisesOrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results by the object's location in Active Directory. @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ResourceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ResourceConfig.md index 077decbd72..fc294207d1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ResourceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ResourceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This example returns all of the available custom room and equipment mailbox prop ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ResubmitRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ResubmitRequest.md index a4f888b146..d5c1c38d27 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ResubmitRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ResubmitRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example returns details about the resubmit request with the identity 1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the resubmit request you want to view. Each resubmit request is identified by an incremented integer value. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RetentionPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RetentionPolicy.md index 877c8a1f16..efc449f3f5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RetentionPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RetentionPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example returns all the properties of the retention policy RP Finance. The ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the policy name. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RetentionPolicyTag.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RetentionPolicyTag.md index a76704a0e9..d7b2481544 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RetentionPolicyTag.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RetentionPolicyTag.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ This example returns all retention tags of Inbox and All types and pipes the res ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the tag. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeSystemTags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeSystemTags switch specifies whether to return any system tags. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter returns the retention tags that are assigned to the retention policy that's applied to the specified mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OptionalInMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OptionalInMailbox parameter is used with the Mailbox parameter to return any opt-in retention tags that are assigned to the specified mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Types -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Types parameter specifies the type of retention tag to return. Valid values include: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md index ba3b5931f4..b9add7499b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ For more information about pipelining and the Format-List cmdlet, see [About Pip ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the assignment policy to view. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleGroup.md index b39c089258..cc8f06f83a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ This example retrieves a list of all linked role groups and the Active Directory ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role group to retrieve. If the name of the role group contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowPartnerLinked -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleGroupMember.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleGroupMember.md index 0d162d0acd..cb790ab104 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleGroupMember.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RoleGroupMember.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example retrieves a list of all the members of the Organization Administrat ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role group for which member information should be retrieved. If the role group name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RpcClientAccess.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RpcClientAccess.md index 75649aaa67..cda52a6cce 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RpcClientAccess.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-RpcClientAccess.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the RPC Client Access service on t ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that you want to view. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SearchDocumentFormat.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SearchDocumentFormat.md index a9c7d69dd8..3c75cb6c59 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SearchDocumentFormat.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SearchDocumentFormat.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves all properties of the docx file format. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of a file format. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SecurityPrincipal.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SecurityPrincipal.md index e79ff3157f..3028fa32a9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SecurityPrincipal.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SecurityPrincipal.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ This example retrieves well-known security principals and displays only the Name ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the security principal. When the security principal is explicitly specified by using this parameter, no additional security principals are returned. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeDomainLocalFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoleGroupAssignable -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The RoleGroupAssignable switch filters security principals by returning only objects that can be assigned to an RBAC role group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Types -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Types parameter filters the results by object type. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SendConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SendConnector.md index b88096e120..2f89d0aed1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SendConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SendConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This example displays detailed information about the Send connector named Contos ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name, or GUID of the Send connector. If the Identity name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). You can omit the Identity parameter label. You can also include the server name by using the format ServerName\\ConnectorName. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderFilterConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderFilterConfig.md index 3a2fac09b4..0640040e6e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderFilterConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderFilterConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the Sender Filter configuration ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com.